1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
Order Today|Dealer-Direct Buy Prices|Delivered + Installed in 48 States

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings Delivered & Installed Starting From $26,485

Steel And Stud is your trusted commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. Order pre-engineered metal buildings for business use in any width and length with pricing starting from $26,485 installed. Request metal building pricing, customize your steel building design, and schedule professional steel building installation across 48 states. Get a free quote, compare commercial building packages, or call 1-877-275-7048 to plan your project today.

$26,485
Starting From
100ft
Clear Span Width
20yr
12ga Frame Warranty
48
States Delivered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1681–1720 of 2740 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Tan metal building kit storefront with dark glass walls and landscaped commercial lot

20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×26Small Business Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 20×26 small business inventory storage fits 20-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 20×26 as a dedicated stock room.

You’re viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size20×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×26
20×26
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 520 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X26-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×26 small business inventory storage.

20 feet wide × 26 feet long. Our 20×26 small business inventory storage fits 20-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 26′ · 520 sq ft

Small Business Inventory Storage layout.

Our 20×26 small business inventory storage fits 20-foot widths and 26-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 20×26 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house. 520 sq ft holds 12 pallet positions on the floor or 24 with steel shelving. A 20×26 roll-up door clears a pallet jack and the height accepts standard 48-inch pallets stacked two-high.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Inventory Storage works well at 20×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
520 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space520 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
520 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

520sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×26 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×26?

520 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 26′ footprint with 520 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,160–$6,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,340+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

20×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 20×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

20×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 20×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

20×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 20×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

20×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 20×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

20×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 20×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

20×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 20×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

20×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 20×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 20×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 20×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 20×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×26 small business inventory storage cost?

A 20×26 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×26 small business inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×26 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 520+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×26 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×26 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×26 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 20×26 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×26 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×26 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×26 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit storefront with dark glass walls and landscaped commercial lot

20×26 Small Business Inventory Storage

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building for equipment storage with mini excavator and skid steers at the open bay

20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×26Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 20×26.

You’re viewing:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage·Size20×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×26
20×26
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 520 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Theft-Resistant
  • Keypad Entry
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X26-CONTRACTOR-JOB-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

20 feet wide × 26 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 26′ · 520 sq ft

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 20×26 as a secure base for tools, fittings, copper, and conduit. The 12-gauge frame upgrade plus locking walk-in door and roll-up combo gives you fast load-in and theft resistance. Stamped drawings keep you compliant with county code.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage works well at 20×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
520 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space520 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor job-site tool and material storage
Everyday contractor job-site tool and material storage
520 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor job-site tool and material storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
contractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, what makes it different.

520sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×26?

520 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 26′ footprint with 520 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,160–$6,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,340+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

20×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 20×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

20×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 20×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

20×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 20×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

20×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 20×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

20×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 20×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

20×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 20×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

20×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 20×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

20×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🎯 20×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 20×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 20×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage cost?

A 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Almost always for 520+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel building for equipment storage with mini excavator and skid steers at the open bay

20×26 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building | Steel and Stud, From $7,700

12

20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,800$7,700SAVE $1,100
or $160/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×26Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with pools convert the 20×26 into a finished pool.

You’re viewing:Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building·Size20×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,700$8,800Save $1,100
or as low as $160/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×26
20×26
this size
$7,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 520 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Pool House Layout
  • Partial Enclosure
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X26-POOL-HOUSE-OUTDOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building.

20 feet wide × 26 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH20′ × 26′ · 520 sq ft ADU

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with pools convert the 20×26 into a finished pool house with changing area, bathroom rough-in, and covered lounge. Wainscoting in a contrasting color gives it residential curb appeal. The 28′ length lets you split it into a 10′ enclosed room plus an 18′ covered patio.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building works well at 20×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
520 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building spec sheet.

Width20′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space520 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house and outdoor entertainment building
Everyday pool house and outdoor entertainment building
520 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house and outdoor entertainment building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house and outdoor entertainment building + seasonal storage
pool house and outdoor entertainment building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building, what makes it different.

520sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$160/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $160/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×26?

520 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 26′ footprint with 520 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,160–$6,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,340+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building also viewed:

🏡 20×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

20×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 20×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

20×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 20×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

20×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 20×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

20×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 20×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

20×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 20×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

20×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 20×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

20×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 20×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

20×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 20×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🏡 20×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 20×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building cost?

A 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building from Steel and Stud starts at $7,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $160/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house and outdoor entertainment building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building?

Almost always for 520+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house and outdoor entertainment building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $160/month on a 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building.

What warranty comes with the 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool house and outdoor entertainment building to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

20×26 Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo | Steel and Stud, From $7,700

12

20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$8,800$7,700SAVE $1,100
or $160/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×26Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gardeners pick the 20×26 with a partial enclosure to split it into a 20×26.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo·Size20×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,700$8,800Save $1,100
or as low as $160/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×26
20×26
this size
$7,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 520 sq ft enclosed
  • Skylight Panels
  • French Doors
  • Gardener Pick
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X26-GARDEN-SHED-GREEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo.

20 feet wide × 26 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 26′ · 520 sq ft shop

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo packs 520 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Gardeners pick the 20×26 with a partial enclosure to split it into a 20×26 enclosed potting and tool shed plus a 20×26 covered greenhouse zone with skylights. Add a French door between the spaces. R-13 insulation in the enclosed half keeps seedlings stable through shoulder seasons.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo works well at 20×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
520 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo spec sheet.

Width20′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space520 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed and greenhouse combo
Everyday garden shed and greenhouse combo
520 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed and greenhouse combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed and greenhouse combo + seasonal storage
garden shed and greenhouse combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo, what makes it different.

520sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$160/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $160/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×26?

520 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 26′ footprint with 520 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,160–$6,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,340+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo also viewed:

🏡 20×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

20×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 20×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

20×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 20×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

20×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 20×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

20×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 20×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

20×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 20×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

20×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 20×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

20×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 20×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

20×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 20×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 20×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏛️ 20×26

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo cost?

A 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo from Steel and Stud starts at $7,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $160/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed and greenhouse combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo?

Almost always for 520+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed and greenhouse combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $160/month on a 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo.

What warranty comes with the 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo typically adds $4,160–$6,240 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

20×26 Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel structure in sandstone buff with clerestory windows and double door entry

20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,650

12

20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,000$9,650SAVE $1,350
or $201/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×26Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage? At 520 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Small churches, scout troops, and nonprofits use the 20×26 to store.

You’re viewing:Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage·Size20×26·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,650$11,000Save $1,350
or as low as $201/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×26
20×26
this size
$9,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 520 sq ft enclosed
  • 140 MPH Rating
  • Code-Certified
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X26-CHURCH-NONPROFITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage.

20 feet wide × 26 feet long. Looking for a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage? At 520 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 26′ · 520 sq ft

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage layout.

Looking for a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage? At 520 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Small churches, scout troops, and nonprofits use the 20×26 to store folding chairs, tables, AV gear, and seasonal decorations. The 12-gauge frame upgrade and 140 MPH wind rating handle exposed rural sites. A single roll-up door plus walk-in keeps daily access simple.

💡 Pro tip:Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage works well at 20×26, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
520 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×26 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length26′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space520 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday church, nonprofit, or community storage
Everyday church, nonprofit, or community storage
520 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church, nonprofit, or community storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch, nonprofit, or community storage + seasonal storage
church, nonprofit, or community storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage, what makes it different.

520sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$201/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $201/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×26?

520 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 26′ footprint with 520 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,160–$6,240 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×26 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×26 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×27×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,340+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×26

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

20×26 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 20×26

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

20×26 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 20×26

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

20×26 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 20×26

Home Office and Hobby Room

20×26 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 20×26

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

20×26 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 20×26

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

20×26 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 20×26

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

20×26 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 20×26

Small Business Inventory Storage

20×26 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 20×26

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

20×26 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 20×26

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

20×26 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 20×26

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

20×26 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage cost?

A 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $201/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud church, nonprofit, or community storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage?

Almost always for 520+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church, nonprofit, or community storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $201/month on a 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×26 church, nonprofit, or community storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel structure in sandstone buff with clerestory windows and double door entry

20×26 Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

520 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 26′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×26 steel building delivers 520 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with green trim sheltering a truck and SUV in a mountain meadow

20×31 Metal Carport (Open)

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Metal Carport (Open) | Steel and Stud, From $9,150

12

20×31 Metal Carport (Open)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,450$9,150SAVE $1,300
or $191/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Metal Carport (Open)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Metal Carport (Open), built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×31 metal carport (open) packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Cheapest 20×31 steel building configuration. Cover 2 to 3 vehicles, ATVs, lawn equipment, or.

You’re viewing:Metal Carport (Open)·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,150$10,450Save $1,300
or as low as $191/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$9,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $4,495
  • 3 Roof Styles
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-METAL-CARPORT-OPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 metal carport (open).

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×31 metal carport (open) packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Metal Carport (Open) layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×31 metal carport (open) packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Cheapest 20×31 steel building configuration. Cover 2 to 3 vehicles, ATVs, lawn equipment, or boats. Add side panels later if you decide to enclose it.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Carport (Open) works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Metal Carport (Open) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport (Open).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport (Open) spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport (Open).

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport (open)
Everyday metal carport (open)
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport (open).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport (open) + seasonal storage
metal carport (open) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Metal Carport (Open), what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$191/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 metal carport (open) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $191/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport (Open) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Metal Carport (Open) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Metal Carport (Open)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport (Open) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport (Open) also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport (Open) questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 metal carport (open) cost?

A 20×31 metal carport (open) from Steel and Stud starts at $9,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $191/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 metal carport (open) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal carport (open) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 metal carport (open)?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport (open) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 metal carport (open) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 metal carport (open) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 metal carport (open) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $191/month on a 20×31 metal carport (open).

What warranty comes with the 20×31 metal carport (open)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 metal carport (open) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×31 metal carport (open) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×31 metal carport (open) typically adds $4,960–$7,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport (Open) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with green trim sheltering a truck and SUV in a mountain meadow

20×31 Metal Carport (Open)

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with black trim, roll-up door and gooseneck light in evening glow

20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud, From $9,150

12

20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,450$9,150SAVE $1,300
or $191/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Workshop / Hobby Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×31 workshop / hobby space fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. 620 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto repair, welding.

You’re viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,150$10,450Save $1,300
or as low as $191/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$9,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $7,995
  • Clear Span
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 workshop / hobby space.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Our 20×31 workshop / hobby space fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Workshop / Hobby Space layout.

Our 20×31 workshop / hobby space fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. 620 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto repair, welding, and crafts. The 20×31 layout gives enough room for tool walls, a workbench, equipment storage, and hobby projects without taking over your property.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop / Hobby Space works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$191/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $191/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 20×31 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $9,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $191/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $191/month on a 20×31 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×31 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×31 workshop / hobby space typically adds $4,960–$7,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with black trim, roll-up door and gooseneck light in evening glow

20×31 Workshop / Hobby Space

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with red awning over glass entry doors and a pickup loading crates

20×31 Commercial Steel Building

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $11,000

12

20×31 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,550$11,000SAVE $1,550
or $229/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Commercial Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 20×31 commercial steel building? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Small retail spaces, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse.

You’re viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,000$12,550Save $1,550
or as low as $229/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$11,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $9,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 commercial steel building.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Looking for a 20×31 commercial steel building? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Commercial Steel Building layout.

Looking for a 20×31 commercial steel building? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Small retail spaces, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Steel Building works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Commercial Steel Building, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$229/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $229/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 commercial steel building cost?

A 20×31 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $11,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $229/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 commercial steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $229/month on a 20×31 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×31 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White commercial metal building with red awning over glass entry doors and a pickup loading crates

20×31 Commercial Steel Building

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal rv metal cover with open front bay and enclosed storage sheltering a motorhome

20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,150

12

20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,450$9,150SAVE $1,300
or $191/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31RV Cover / Boat Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×31 rv cover / boat storage packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Year-round protection for travel trailers, smaller RVs, boats, jet skis, and towable.

You’re viewing:RV Cover / Boat Storage·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,150$10,450Save $1,300
or as low as $191/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$9,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $4,995
  • Up to 16 Tall
  • 12’W Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-RV-COVER-BOAT-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 rv cover / boat storage.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×31 rv cover / boat storage packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

RV BAYDaily Driver20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft · tall walls

RV Cover / Boat Storage layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 20×31 rv cover / boat storage packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Year-round protection for travel trailers, smaller RVs, boats, jet skis, and towable campers. The 30-foot depth gives practical covered storage while the 20-foot width leaves room for access along the sides.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover / Boat Storage works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover / Boat Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover / Boat Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover / Boat Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover / boat storage
Everyday rv cover / boat storage
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover / boat storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage
rv cover / boat storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$191/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 rv cover / boat storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $191/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover / Boat Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover / Boat Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover / Boat Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover / Boat Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 rv cover / boat storage cost?

A 20×31 rv cover / boat storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $191/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 rv cover / boat storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 rv cover / boat storage?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover / boat storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 rv cover / boat storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 rv cover / boat storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 rv cover / boat storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $191/month on a 20×31 rv cover / boat storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 rv cover / boat storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 rv cover / boat storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×31 rv cover / boat storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×31 rv cover / boat storage typically adds $4,960–$7,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover / Boat Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal rv metal cover with open front bay and enclosed storage sheltering a motorhome

20×31 RV Cover / Boat Storage

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure home gym with black roll-up door and glass corner entry showing weight racks

20×31 Home Gym / Studio

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Home Gym / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $9,150

12

20×31 Home Gym / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,450$9,150SAVE $1,300
or $191/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Home Gym / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Home Gym / Studio, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×31 home gym / studio packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Private 620 sq ft fitness space with high ceilings, durable floors, and full insulation for.

You’re viewing:Home Gym / Studio·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,150$10,450Save $1,300
or as low as $191/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$9,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $7,995
  • Insulated
  • Wired Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-HOME-GYM-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 home gym / studio.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×31 home gym / studio packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 31′ · 620 ground + loft

Home Gym / Studio layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 20×31 home gym / studio packs 620 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Private 620 sq ft fitness space with high ceilings, durable floors, and full insulation for year-round training. Room for a power rack, cardio equipment, free weights, and a small studio area.

💡 Pro tip:Home Gym / Studio works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Home Gym / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym / Studio spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym / studio
Everyday home gym / studio
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym / studio + seasonal storage
home gym / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Home Gym / Studio, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$191/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 home gym / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $191/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Home Gym / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Home Gym / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Gym / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym / Studio also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 home gym / studio cost?

A 20×31 home gym / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $9,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $191/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 home gym / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home gym / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 home gym / studio?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 home gym / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 home gym / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 home gym / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $191/month on a 20×31 home gym / studio.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 home gym / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 home gym / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×31 home gym / studio for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym / studio to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure home gym with black roll-up door and glass corner entry showing weight racks

20×31 Home Gym / Studio

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure hay barn at twilight with round bales glowing inside doorway

20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) | Steel and Stud, From $9,800

12

20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,150$9,800SAVE $1,350
or $204/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch), built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch)? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Tractor barn, hay storage, livestock shelter, or feed barn. Heavy-duty galvanized steel.

You’re viewing:Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,800$11,150Save $1,350
or as low as $204/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$9,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $6,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-METAL-BARN-FARM-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch).

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Looking for a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch)? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) layout.

Looking for a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch)? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Tractor barn, hay storage, livestock shelter, or feed barn. Heavy-duty galvanized steel handles harsh agricultural use, and the 20-foot width improves equipment movement inside the building.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch).

DAILY USEEveryday metal barn (farm & ranch)
Everyday metal barn (farm & ranch)
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal barn (farm & ranch).
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal barn (farm & ranch) + seasonal storage
metal barn (farm & ranch) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch), what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$204/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $204/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) cost?

A 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) from Steel and Stud starts at $9,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $204/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal barn (farm & ranch) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch)?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal barn (farm & ranch) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $204/month on a 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch).

What warranty comes with the 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure hay barn at twilight with round bales glowing inside doorway

20×31 Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat | Steel and Stud, From $9,150

12

20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,450$9,150SAVE $1,300
or $191/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Backyard Studio / Retreat

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Personal retreat away from the house. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or.

You’re viewing:Backyard Studio / Retreat·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,150$10,450Save $1,300
or as low as $191/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$9,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $7,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-BACKYARD-STUDIO-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 backyard studio / retreat.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Looking for a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 31′ · 620 ground + loft

Backyard Studio / Retreat layout.

Looking for a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Personal retreat away from the house. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with space for a desk, seating, and storage. Fully insulated and pre-wired for HVAC, lighting, and entertainment.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Studio / Retreat works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Studio / Retreat.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Studio / Retreat spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Studio / Retreat.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard studio / retreat
Everyday backyard studio / retreat
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard studio / retreat.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard studio / retreat + seasonal storage
backyard studio / retreat + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$191/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 backyard studio / retreat is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $191/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Studio / Retreat shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Studio / Retreat · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Studio / Retreat also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Studio / Retreat questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat cost?

A 20×31 backyard studio / retreat from Steel and Stud starts at $9,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $191/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 backyard studio / retreat price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard studio / retreat ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard studio / retreat different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $191/month on a 20×31 backyard studio / retreat.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 backyard studio / retreat?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 backyard studio / retreat in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×31 backyard studio / retreat for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a backyard studio / retreat to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Studio / Retreat quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building garden studio at golden hour with french doors, window box, and wooden bench

20×31 Backyard Studio / Retreat

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building welding workshop with open roll-up door, forklift, and steel beams

20×31 Factory / Warehouse

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Factory / Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $11,400

12

20×31 Factory / Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,000$11,400SAVE $1,600
or $238/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Factory / Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Factory / Warehouse, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

20×31 delivers 620 sq ft of heavy-duty factory / warehouse space. Inventory staging, service bays, small equipment storage, and light production. Heavy-duty 12-gauge framing with up to 20 clear-span height gives room.

You’re viewing:Factory / Warehouse·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • From $9,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-FACTORY-WAREHOUSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 factory / warehouse.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. 20×31 delivers 620 sq ft of heavy-duty factory / warehouse space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Factory / Warehouse layout.

20×31 delivers 620 sq ft of heavy-duty factory / warehouse space. Inventory staging, service bays, small equipment storage, and light production. Heavy-duty 12-gauge framing with up to 20 clear-span height gives room for forklifts, pallet storage, and small-scale commercial work.

💡 Pro tip:Factory / Warehouse works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Factory / Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Factory / Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Factory / Warehouse spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Factory / Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday factory / warehouse
Everyday factory / warehouse
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a factory / warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfactory / warehouse + seasonal storage
factory / warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Factory / Warehouse, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 factory / warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Factory / Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Factory / Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Factory / Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Factory / Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Factory / Warehouse also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Factory / Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 factory / warehouse cost?

A 20×31 factory / warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 factory / warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud factory / warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 factory / warehouse?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud factory / warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 factory / warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 factory / warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 factory / warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 20×31 factory / warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 factory / warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 factory / warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×31 factory / warehouse handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×31 factory / warehouse ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Factory / Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building welding workshop with open roll-up door, forklift, and steel beams

20×31 Factory / Warehouse

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with road grader in the bay and loaded dump truck outside

20×31 Government / Institutional

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Government / Institutional | Steel and Stud, From $11,100

12

20×31 Government / Institutional
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Government / Institutional

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Government / Institutional, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 20×31 government / institutional? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Evacuation shelters, municipal equipment storage, field offices, and emergency.

You’re viewing:Government / Institutional·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$11,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • Fire Code
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-GOVERNMENT-INSTIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 government / institutional.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Looking for a 20×31 government / institutional? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Government / Institutional layout.

Looking for a 20×31 government / institutional? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Evacuation shelters, municipal equipment storage, field offices, and emergency response staging. Engineered up to 170+ MPH wind ratings with stamped permit-ready drawings.

💡 Pro tip:Government / Institutional works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Government / Institutional in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Government / Institutional.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Government / Institutional spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Government / Institutional.

DAILY USEEveryday government / institutional
Everyday government / institutional
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a government / institutional.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgovernment / institutional + seasonal storage
government / institutional + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Government / Institutional, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 government / institutional is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Government / Institutional shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Government / Institutional buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Government / Institutional

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Government / Institutional · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Government / Institutional also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Government / Institutional questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 government / institutional cost?

A 20×31 government / institutional from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 government / institutional price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud government / institutional ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 government / institutional?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud government / institutional different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 government / institutional need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 government / institutional delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 government / institutional without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 20×31 government / institutional.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 government / institutional?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 government / institutional in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×31 government / institutional pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Government / Institutional quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with road grader in the bay and loaded dump truck outside

20×31 Government / Institutional

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,800

12

20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,150$9,800SAVE $1,350
or $204/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up.

You’re viewing:Equestrian Arena / Tack Room·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,800$11,150Save $1,350
or as low as $204/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$9,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Looking for a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room layout.

Looking for a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room? At 620 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

💡 Pro tip:Equestrian Arena / Tack Room works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena / tack room
Everyday equestrian arena / tack room
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena / tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
equestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$204/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $204/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena / Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena / Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🏛️ 20×31

Houses of Worship

20×31 houses of worship configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Houses of Worship →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room cost?

A 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $204/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $204/month on a 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×31 equestrian arena / tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

20×31 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel structure church in three quarter view with cross, stained glass, and stone base

20×31 Houses of Worship

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×31 Houses of Worship | Steel and Stud, From $11,100

12

20×31 Houses of Worship
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,650$11,100SAVE $1,550
or $231/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×31Houses of Worship

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×31 Houses of Worship, engineered to code for assembly use.

Our 20×31 houses of worship fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Churches, mosques, temples, and gurdwaras. Column-free 620 sq ft interior fits.

You’re viewing:Houses of Worship·Size20×31·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,100$12,650Save $1,550
or as low as $231/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×31
20×31
this size
$11,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 620 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X31-HOUSES-WORSHIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×31 houses of worship.

20 feet wide × 31 feet long. Our 20×31 houses of worship fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 31′ · 620 sq ft

Houses of Worship layout.

Our 20×31 houses of worship fits 20-foot widths and 31-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Churches, mosques, temples, and gurdwaras. Column-free 620 sq ft interior fits small-group seating, fellowship use, classrooms, and multi-purpose community layouts.

💡 Pro tip:Houses of Worship works well at 20×31, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×31 Houses of Worship in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Houses of Worship.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
620 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×31 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Houses of Worship spec sheet.

Width20′
Length31′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space620 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Houses of Worship.

DAILY USEEveryday houses of worship
Everyday houses of worship
620 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a houses of worship.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhouses of worship + seasonal storage
houses of worship + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×31 Houses of Worship, what makes it different.

620sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$231/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×31 houses of worship is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $231/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×31?

620 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 31′ footprint with 620 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $4,960–$7,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Houses of Worship shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×31 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×31 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×31 Houses of Worship buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×31 Houses of Worship

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Houses of Worship · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×32×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,790+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Houses of Worship also viewed:

🏡 20×31

Metal Garage (2 Cars)

20×31 metal garage (2 cars) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Garage (2 Cars) →

🏡 20×31

Workshop / Hobby Space

20×31 workshop / hobby space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →

🏡 20×31

Metal Carport (Open)

20×31 metal carport (open) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport (Open) →

🏢 20×31

Commercial Steel Building

20×31 commercial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Steel Building →

🏡 20×31

RV Cover / Boat Storage

20×31 rv cover / boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →

🎯 20×31

Home Gym / Studio

20×31 home gym / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Gym / Studio →

🌾 20×31

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

20×31 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →

🎯 20×31

Backyard Studio / Retreat

20×31 backyard studio / retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Studio / Retreat →

🏭 20×31

Factory / Warehouse

20×31 factory / warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Factory / Warehouse →

🏛️ 20×31

Government / Institutional

20×31 government / institutional configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Government / Institutional →

🌾 20×31

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

20×31 equestrian arena / tack room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Houses of Worship questions, answered.

How much does a 20×31 houses of worship cost?

A 20×31 houses of worship from Steel and Stud starts at $11,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $231/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×31 houses of worship price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud houses of worship ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×31 houses of worship?

Almost always for 620+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud houses of worship different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×31 houses of worship need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×31 houses of worship delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×31 houses of worship without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $231/month on a 20×31 houses of worship.

What warranty comes with the 20×31 houses of worship?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×31 houses of worship in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×31 houses of worship pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Houses of Worship quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel structure church in three quarter view with cross, stained glass, and stone base

20×31 Houses of Worship

620 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 31′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×31 steel building delivers 620 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel garage with twin roll-up doors and timber post porch at a sunset lake

20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners spec this as a detached two car garage with a workbench wall and tool storage at the rear. Two full-size trucks park nose-in with about 12 feet behind for shelving and a workbench. The extra length over a.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$10,350
20×36
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Two 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 two-car detached garage.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Homeowners spec this as a detached two car garage with a workbench wall and tool storage at the rear.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners spec this as a detached two car garage with a workbench wall and tool storage at the rear. Two full-size trucks park nose-in with about 12 feet behind for shelving and a workbench. The extra length over a 20×36 means you don’t have to back the second vehicle out to reach the toolbox.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 two-car detached garage cost?

A 20×36 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×36 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×36 two-car detached garage typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel garage with twin roll-up doors and timber post porch at a sunset lake

20×36 Two-Car Detached Garage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Long blue prefab metal building with tall roll-up door and white trim near a mountain lake

20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36Three-Car Compact Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage, built for daily backyard use.

20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of everyday three-car compact garage space. Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot.

You’re viewing:Three-Car Compact Garage·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$10,350
20×36
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 3-Car Capable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-THREE-CAR-COMPACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 three-car compact garage.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. 20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of everyday three-car compact garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft

Three-Car Compact Garage layout.

20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of everyday three-car compact garage space. Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a 20×36 roll-up on each gable for pull-through, or one 16-foot opening for side parking.

💡 Pro tip:Three-Car Compact Garage works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Compact Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Compact Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Compact Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car compact garage
Everyday three-car compact garage
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car compact garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car compact garage + seasonal storage
three-car compact garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 three-car compact garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Compact Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Compact Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Compact Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Compact Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 three-car compact garage cost?

A 20×36 three-car compact garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 three-car compact garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud three-car compact garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 three-car compact garage?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car compact garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 three-car compact garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 three-car compact garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 three-car compact garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 three-car compact garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 three-car compact garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 three-car compact garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×36 three-car compact garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×36 three-car compact garage typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Compact Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Long blue prefab metal building with tall roll-up door and white trim near a mountain lake

20×36 Three-Car Compact Garage

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Ebony steel barn with cupola, weathervane and sliding X-brace doors among autumn trees

20×36 RV Cover and Carport

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 RV Cover and Carport | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

20×36 RV Cover and Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36RV Cover and Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 RV Cover and Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of hobby-ready rv cover and carport space. RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most.

You’re viewing:RV Cover and Carport·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$10,350
20×36
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 12-14 ft Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-RV-COVER-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 rv cover and carport.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. 20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of hobby-ready rv cover and carport space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft

RV Cover and Carport layout.

20×36 delivers 720 sq ft of hobby-ready rv cover and carport space. RV owners use the 35-foot length to cover a Class C, Class B+, or 30-foot travel trailer with hitch room to spare. A 13-foot leg height clears most rooftop AC units and slide-toppers. Order it open on the gable ends, partially enclosed for storage, or fully enclosed as a garage with a 20×36 roll-up.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover and Carport works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 RV Cover and Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover and Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover and Carport spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover and Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover and carport
Everyday rv cover and carport
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover and carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover and carport + seasonal storage
rv cover and carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 RV Cover and Carport, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 rv cover and carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover and Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 RV Cover and Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 RV Cover and Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover and Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover and Carport also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover and Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 rv cover and carport cost?

A 20×36 rv cover and carport from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 rv cover and carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover and carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 rv cover and carport?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover and carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 rv cover and carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 rv cover and carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 rv cover and carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 rv cover and carport.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 rv cover and carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 rv cover and carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×36 rv cover and carport for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover and carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover and Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Ebony steel barn with cupola, weathervane and sliding X-brace doors among autumn trees

20×36 RV Cover and Carport

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Copper colored metal workshop with dark roll-up door and side windows in a mountain valley

20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,500

12

20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,250$12,500SAVE $1,750
or $260/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36Workshop and Detached Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 workshop and detached shop packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached.

You’re viewing:Workshop and Detached Shop·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$12,200
20×36
this size
$12,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Insulated
  • R-19 Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-WORKSHOP-DETACHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 workshop and detached shop.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 workshop and detached shop packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft

Workshop and Detached Shop layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 workshop and detached shop packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 720 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×36 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a 36-inch walk-in, and two 20×36 windows for cross-ventilation and natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop and Detached Shop works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop and Detached Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop and Detached Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop and Detached Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop and detached shop
Everyday workshop and detached shop
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop and detached shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
workshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 workshop and detached shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop and Detached Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop and Detached Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop and Detached Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop and Detached Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 workshop and detached shop cost?

A 20×36 workshop and detached shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 workshop and detached shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 workshop and detached shop?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 workshop and detached shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 workshop and detached shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 workshop and detached shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 20×36 workshop and detached shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 workshop and detached shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 workshop and detached shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×36 workshop and detached shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop and Detached Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Copper colored metal workshop with dark roll-up door and side windows in a mountain valley

20×36 Workshop and Detached Shop

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel barn with open equipment bays sheltering tractors, a prefab metal structure for farms

20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round.

You’re viewing:Hobby Farm Equipment Shed·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$11,000
20×36
this size
$11,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Ready
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 36′ · 720 ground + loft

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed layout.

Looking for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Hobby farmers cover a sub-compact tractor, brush hog, finish mower, ATV, and a stack of round bales under one roof. The 12-foot leg option clears a Kubota with a front-end loader raised. Open the gable end for drive-through access and add a lean-to later for hay storage off one sidewall.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Farm Equipment Shed works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm equipment shed
Everyday hobby farm equipment shed
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm equipment shed + seasonal storage
hobby farm equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed cost?

A 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×36 hobby farm equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal steel barn with open equipment bays sheltering tractors, a prefab metal structure for farms

20×36 Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal building kit with monitor roof, vent stacks, windows, and white roll up door

20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36Two-Stall Horse Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 20×36 two-stall horse barn fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×36 stalls plus an 11-foot.

You’re viewing:Two-Stall Horse Barn·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$11,000
20×36
this size
$11,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Vertical Roof
  • 2 Stalls + Tack
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-TWO-STALL-HORSE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 two-stall horse barn.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 20×36 two-stall horse barn fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft

Two-Stall Horse Barn layout.

Our 20×36 two-stall horse barn fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Equestrians configure this footprint as two 20×36 stalls plus an 11-foot tack/feed aisle. The vertical roof sheds rain cleanly off the 35-foot run, and 20×36 windows on each stall give airflow. Add a sliding barn door at one gable and Dutch doors on the long wall for direct paddock turnout.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Stall Horse Barn works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Stall Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Stall Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Stall Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday two-stall horse barn
Everyday two-stall horse barn
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-stall horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
two-stall horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 two-stall horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Stall Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Stall Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Stall Horse Barn also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Stall Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 two-stall horse barn cost?

A 20×36 two-stall horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 two-stall horse barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 two-stall horse barn?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-stall horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 two-stall horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 two-stall horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 two-stall horse barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 20×36 two-stall horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 two-stall horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 two-stall horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×36 two-stall horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Stall Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal building kit with monitor roof, vent stacks, windows, and white roll up door

20×36 Two-Stall Horse Barn

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal shed with green trim and open front bays in pine forest

20×36 Storage Building

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

20×36 Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

Our 20×36 storage building fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Spec one 20×36 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch walk-in for daily.

You’re viewing:Storage Building·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$10,350
20×36
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 8-10 ft Legs
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • Budget Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 storage building.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 20×36 storage building fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft shop

Storage Building layout.

Our 20×36 storage building fits 20-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Spec one 20×36 roll-up for ride-on equipment and one 36-inch walk-in for daily access. 14-gauge framing and 29-gauge panels keep the price floor low.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building
Everyday storage building
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building + seasonal storage
storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Storage Building, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 storage building cost?

A 20×36 storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 storage building?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×36 storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×36 storage building typically adds $5,760–$8,640 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal shed with green trim and open front bays in pine forest

20×36 Storage Building

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red metal barn with white roll-up door, cupola and black pasture fencing in front

20×36 Man Cave and She Shed

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×36 Man Cave and She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,650

12

20×36 Man Cave and She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,150$10,650SAVE $1,500
or $222/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×36Man Cave and She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Man Cave and She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 20×36 man cave and she shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×36.

You’re viewing:Man Cave and She Shed·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,650$12,150Save $1,500
or as low as $222/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$10,350
20×36
this size
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • French Doors
  • Insulated Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×36 man cave and she shed.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 20×36 man cave and she shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 36′ · 720 ground + loft

Man Cave and She Shed layout.

Looking for a 20×36 man cave and she shed? At 720 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×36 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 720 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with cutting tables, shelving, and a reading nook. Insulate with R-13 vapor barrier minimum.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave and She Shed works well at 20×36, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Man Cave and She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave and She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave and She Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave and She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave and she shed
Everyday man cave and she shed
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave and she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave and she shed + seasonal storage
man cave and she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Man Cave and She Shed, what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$222/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 man cave and she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $222/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave and She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Man Cave and She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Man Cave and She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave and She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave and She Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🏢 20×36

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave and She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 man cave and she shed cost?

A 20×36 man cave and she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $222/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 man cave and she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave and she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 man cave and she shed?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave and she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 man cave and she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 man cave and she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 man cave and she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $222/month on a 20×36 man cave and she shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 man cave and she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 man cave and she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×36 man cave and she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave and she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave and She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red metal barn with white roll-up door, cupola and black pasture fencing in front

20×36 Man Cave and She Shed

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x36 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 720 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud — From $12,500
12
20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,250$12,500SAVE $1,750
or $260/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×36Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job.

You're viewing:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$12,200
20×36
this size
$12,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • Security Bars
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:12 GA Frame. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width20'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage and job trailer cover
Everyday contractor storage and job trailer cover
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage and job trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
contractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover — what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →
🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover and Carport →
🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →
🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →
🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →
🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building →
🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and She Shed →
🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →
🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →
🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover cost?

A 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x36 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 720 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

720 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×36 steel building delivers 720 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud — From $12,500
12
20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,250$12,500SAVE $1,750
or $260/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×36Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job.

You're viewing:Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover·Size20×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,500$14,250Save $1,750
or as low as $260/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×36
20×35
smaller
$12,200
20×36
this size
$12,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 720 sq ft enclosed
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • Security Bars
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X36-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your jobsite storage layout.

20 feet wide × 36 feet long. Drive-in door for daily load-in/load-out. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover packs 720 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Material racksEquipment parkingSecure tool cage20′ × 36′ · 720 sq ft · jobsite storage layout

Material racks · Equipment parking · Secure tool cage

Material racks at the front, equipment parking in the middle, secure tool cage at the rear. Capacity: crew tools + materials + small equipment. Contractors and electricians park a 20-foot enclosed job trailer plus a service van under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:12 GA Frame. Size affords: tool cage, material racking, site-power panel.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
720 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width20'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space720 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage and job trailer cover
Everyday contractor storage and job trailer cover
720 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage and job trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
contractor storage and job trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover — what makes it different.

720sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$260/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $260/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×36?

720 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 36′ footprint with 720 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,760–$8,640 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×36 Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,240+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 20×36

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×36 two-car detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →
🏡 20×36

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×36 three-car compact garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →
🎯 20×36

RV Cover and Carport

20×36 rv cover and carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover and Carport →
🏢 20×36

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×36 workshop and detached shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →
🌾 20×36

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×36 hobby farm equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →
🌾 20×36

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×36 two-stall horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →
🏡 20×36

Storage Building

20×36 storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building →
🎯 20×36

Man Cave and She Shed

20×36 man cave and she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave and She Shed →
🌾 20×36

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×36 round-bale and grain storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →
🏭 20×36

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×36 small fabrication and welding shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →
🎯 20×36

Boat and Toy Storage

20×36 boat and toy storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Toy Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover cost?

A 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $12,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $260/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Almost always for 720+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage and job trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $260/month on a 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×36 contractor storage and job trailer cover meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with black roll-up door, dark wainscot and steel walk door near mountains

18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners pick the 18×36 when a basic 18×36 feels cramped and a 18×36.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$9,300
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Fits Full-Size Truck
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-SINGLE-CAR-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Vehicle bay 1Vehicle bay 2Workbench / tools18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · multi-bay garage

Vehicle bay 1 · Vehicle bay 2 · Workbench / tools

Vehicle bay 1 on one end, vehicle bay 2 through the middle, workbench / tools at the rear. Homeowners pick the 18×36 when a basic 18×36 feels cramped and a 18×36 feels excessive.

💡 Pro tip:Fits Full-Size Truck, add insulation, electrical, and a vehicle bay 1-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car garage with workshop bench
Everyday single-car garage with workshop bench
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car garage with workshop bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
single-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×36

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×36

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×36 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×36

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×36

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×36 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×36

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×36 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench cost?

A 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal workshop with black roll-up door, dark wainscot and steel walk door near mountains

18×36 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark gray metal garage with matching roll-up door, white entry door, and gable roof

18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$9,300
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Hobbyist Favorite
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Our 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Storage18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Storage

Workbench wall on one end, table saw / center through the middle, lumber / storage at the rear. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a dedicated shop separate from the house.

💡 Pro tip:Hobbyist Favorite, add insulation, electrical, and a workbench wall-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop for hobbyists
Everyday backyard workshop for hobbyists
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
backyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×36

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×36

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×36 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×36

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×36

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×36 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×36

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×36 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists cost?

A 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark gray metal garage with matching roll-up door, white entry door, and gable roof

18×36 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Copper prefab metal building with black roll-up door and open drive-through bay at sunset

18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re.

You’re viewing:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$9,300
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Wide Roll-Up
  • Two-Car Capable
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-TWO-COMPACT-CARSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your two compact cars tucked side-by-side layout.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · two compact cars tucked side-by-side layout

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re careful with the doors. Most buyers pair this with a single 16-foot roll-up door for both bays. You won’t have room for storage along the walls, but you will get both cars under steel.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Capable, add insulation, electrical, and a main-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

DAILY USEEveryday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
Everyday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
two compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×36

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×36

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×36 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×36

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×36

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×36 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×36

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×36 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side cost?

A 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Copper prefab metal building with black roll-up door and open drive-through bay at sunset

18×36 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,550

12

18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,900$9,550SAVE $1,350
or $199/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Home Office and Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 home office and hobby room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×36 into a fully insulated.

You’re viewing:Home Office and Hobby Room·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,550$10,900Save $1,350
or as low as $199/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$9,300
18×36
this size
$9,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Detached Office
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-HOME-OFFICE-HOBBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 18×36 home office and hobby room packs 648 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Main loungeWet bar / Kitch.BATH / STORAGE18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / Kitch. · Bath / Storage

Main lounge on one end, wet bar / kitch. through the middle, bath / storage at the rear. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×36 into a fully insulated detached office.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Office, add insulation, electrical, and a main lounge-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office and Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office and Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office and Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday home office and hobby room
Everyday home office and hobby room
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office and hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office and hobby room + seasonal storage
home office and hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$199/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 home office and hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $199/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office and Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office and Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office and Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×36

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×36

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🌾 18×36

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 18×36

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×36 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×36

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×36 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office and Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 home office and hobby room cost?

A 18×36 home office and hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $199/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 home office and hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office and hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 home office and hobby room?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office and hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 home office and hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 home office and hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 home office and hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $199/month on a 18×36 home office and hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 home office and hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 home office and hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×36 home office and hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×36 home office and hobby room typically adds $5,184–$7,776 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office and Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building studio with black double doors and ornamental grass landscaping

18×36 Home Office and Hobby Room

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Orange metal carport sheltering a black truck and UTV near a pond at sunset

18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,200

12

18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,650$10,200SAVE $1,450
or $213/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×36 as a dedicated equipment shed.

You’re viewing:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$9,950
18×36
this size
$10,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Gravel Anchors OK
  • Rural Workhorse
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-ATV-MOWER-LAWN-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your toy-storage layout.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑ATV / bikesDaily driverTool wall18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · toy-storage layout

ATV / bikes · Daily driver · Tool wall

ATV / bikes on one end, daily driver through the middle, tool wall at the rear. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×36 as a dedicated equipment shed.

💡 Pro tip:Rural Workhorse, add insulation, electrical, and a atv / bikes-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
Everyday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×36

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×36

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×36

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×36 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×36

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×36 tractor shed with implement storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →

🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×36

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×36 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage cost?

A 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Orange metal carport sheltering a black truck and UTV near a pond at sunset

18×36 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18x36 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 648 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,200

12

18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,650$10,200SAVE $1,450
or $213/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×36Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with.

You’re viewing:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,200$11,650Save $1,450
or as low as $213/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$9,950
18×36
this size
$10,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Tractor Clearance
  • Lean-To Compatible
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Looking for a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage? At 648 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Tractor bayImplement bayTool rack18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

Tractor bay · Implement bay · Tool rack

Tractor bay on one end, implement bay through the middle, tool rack at the rear. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor Clearance, add insulation, electrical, and a tractor bay-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length36′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed with implement storage
Everyday tractor shed with implement storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed with implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$213/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $213/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed with Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed with Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →

🏡 18×36

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →

🏡 18×36

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →

🏡 18×36

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×36 home office and hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →

🌾 18×36

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →

🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →

🏢 18×36

Small Business Inventory Storage

18×36 small business inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Inventory Storage →

🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →

🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →

🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →

🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage cost?

A 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $213/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $213/month on a 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×36 tractor shed with implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x36 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 648 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×36 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $11,400
12
18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,000$11,400SAVE $1,600
or $238/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×36Small Business Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room.

You're viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$11,150
18×36
this size
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 10x8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12' Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 5 workstations. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house.

💡 Pro tip:12 Pallet Spots. Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA restroom.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width18'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →
🏡 18×36

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →
🏡 18×36

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →
🏡 18×36

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×36 home office and hobby room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →
🌾 18×36

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →
🌾 18×36

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×36 tractor shed with implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →
🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →
🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →
🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →
🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →
🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 small business inventory storage cost?

A 18×36 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 small business inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×36 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Build a 2-Story Steel Building

18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage

648 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 36′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×36 steel building delivers 648 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $11,400
12
18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,000$11,400SAVE $1,600
or $238/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings18×36Small Business Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room.

You're viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×36·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,400$13,000Save $1,600
or as low as $238/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×36
18×35
smaller
$11,150
18×36
this size
$11,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 648 sq ft enclosed
  • 10x8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12' Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X36-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

18 feet wide × 36 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. Our 18×36 small business inventory storage fits 18-foot widths and 36-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES18′ × 36′ · 648 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 5 workstations. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×36 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house.

💡 Pro tip:12 Pallet Spots. Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA restroom.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
648 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×36 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width18'
Length36' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space648 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
648 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

648sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$238/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×36 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $238/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×36?

648 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 36′ footprint with 648 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,184–$7,776 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×36 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 18×36 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×36 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×37×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,916+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×36

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

18×36 single-car garage with workshop bench configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench →
🏡 18×36

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

18×36 backyard workshop for hobbyists configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists →
🏡 18×36

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

18×36 two compact cars tucked side-by-side configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side →
🏡 18×36

Home Office and Hobby Room

18×36 home office and hobby room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Office and Hobby Room →
🌾 18×36

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

18×36 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage →
🌾 18×36

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

18×36 tractor shed with implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tractor Shed with Implement Storage →
🎯 18×36

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

18×36 collector car and motorcycle showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom →
🏢 18×36

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

18×36 contractor job-site tool and material storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage →
🎯 18×36

Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building

18×36 pool house and outdoor entertainment building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Pool House and Outdoor Entertainment Building →
🏡 18×36

Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo

18×36 garden shed and greenhouse combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Garden Shed and Greenhouse Combo →
🏛️ 18×36

Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage

18×36 church, nonprofit, or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church, Nonprofit, or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×36 small business inventory storage cost?

A 18×36 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $238/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×36 small business inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×36 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 648+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×36 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×36 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×36 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $238/month on a 18×36 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×36 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×36 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×36 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

100×150 Distribution Warehouse

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×150 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $240,550

12

100×150 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×150Distribution Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×150 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile.

You’re viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24′ Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Our 100×150 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Loading bayINVENTORY AISLESOffice / Break100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · warehouse layout

Loading bay · Inventory aisles · Office / Break

Loading bay on one end, inventory aisles through the middle, office / break at the rear. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout, add insulation, electrical, and a loading bay-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×150 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 distribution warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

100×150 Distribution Warehouse

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

100×150 Manufacturing Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×150 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $240,950

12

100×150 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×150Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×150 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Walls
  • Crane-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay on one end, material storage through the middle, office / break at the rear. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×150 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Clear Span 100′, add insulation, electrical, and a weld / fab bay-side window for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×150

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×150 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×150

Self-Storage Facility

100×150 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×150 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

100×150 Manufacturing Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

100×200 Distribution Warehouse

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×200 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $299,900

12

100×200 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$341,900$299,900SAVE $42,000
or $6248/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×200Distribution Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×200 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×200 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile.

You’re viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×200
100×200
this size
$299,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 20,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24′ Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Our 100×200 distribution warehouse fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 200′ · 20,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~400 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×200 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×200 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.

20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×200 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×200?

20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×200 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×200 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×201×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$90,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×200

Manufacturing Facility

100×200 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×200

Commercial Workshop

100×200 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×200

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×200 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×200

Aircraft Hangar

100×200 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×200

Cold Storage Facility

100×200 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🌾 100×200

Indoor Riding Arena

100×200 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×200

Retail & Showroom

100×200 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×200

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×200 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×200

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×200 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×200

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×200 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×200

Self-Storage Facility

100×200 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×200 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×200 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 distribution warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×200 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×200 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×200 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×200 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×200 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×200 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×200 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$299,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building warehouse with roll-up door and box truck at the loading dock

100×200 Distribution Warehouse

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$299,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

100×200 Manufacturing Facility

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×200 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $300,300

12

100×200 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$342,350$300,300SAVE $42,050
or $6256/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×200Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×200 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×200 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$300,300$342,350Save $42,050
or as low as $6256/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×200
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×200
this size
$300,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 20,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Walls
  • Crane-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

100 feet wide × 200 feet long. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing facility space.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break100′ × 200′ · 20,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Manufacturers running CNC, metal fab, or assembly lines pick 100×200 to floor a full production cell with QC, packout, and shipping under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Clear Span 100′.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×200 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×200 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6256/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×200 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6256/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×200?

20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×200 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×200 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×201×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$90,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×200

Distribution Warehouse

100×200 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏢 100×200

Commercial Workshop

100×200 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×200

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×200 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×200

Aircraft Hangar

100×200 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×200

Cold Storage Facility

100×200 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🌾 100×200

Indoor Riding Arena

100×200 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×200

Retail & Showroom

100×200 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×200

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×200 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×200

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×200 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×200

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×200 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×200

Self-Storage Facility

100×200 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×200 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×200 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $300,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6256/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×200 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×200 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×200 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×200 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6256/month on a 100×200 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×200 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×200 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×200 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×200 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$300,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

100×200 Manufacturing Facility

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$300,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with white trim, roll-up door and window on a country lot

100×200 Commercial Workshop

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×200 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $299,900

12

100×200 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$341,900$299,900SAVE $42,000
or $6248/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×200Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×200 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×200 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×200
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×200
this size
$299,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 20,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 200′ · 20,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×200 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door.

💡 Pro tip:Multi-Tenant Ready. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×200 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×200 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×200 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×200?

20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×200 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×200 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×201×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$90,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×200

Distribution Warehouse

100×200 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×200

Manufacturing Facility

100×200 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🌾 100×200

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×200 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×200

Aircraft Hangar

100×200 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×200

Cold Storage Facility

100×200 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🌾 100×200

Indoor Riding Arena

100×200 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×200

Retail & Showroom

100×200 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×200

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×200 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×200

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×200 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×200

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×200 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×200

Self-Storage Facility

100×200 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×200 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×200 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×200 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×200 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×200 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×200 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×200 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×200 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×200 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$299,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with white trim, roll-up door and window on a country lot

100×200 Commercial Workshop

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$299,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream steel structure with lean-to canopy covering a green tractor, mower, and hay bales

100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud, From $298,700

12

100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$340,500$298,700SAVE $41,800
or $6223/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×200Equipment & Hay Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×200 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. 100×200 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

You’re viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$298,700$340,500Save $41,800
or as low as $6223/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×200
100×200
this size
$298,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 20,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Our 100×200 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 200-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment100′ × 200′ · 20,000 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. 100×200 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn, what makes it different.

20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6223/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×200 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6223/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×200?

20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×201×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$90,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×200

Distribution Warehouse

100×200 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×200

Manufacturing Facility

100×200 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×200

Commercial Workshop

100×200 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×200

Aircraft Hangar

100×200 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×200

Cold Storage Facility

100×200 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🌾 100×200

Indoor Riding Arena

100×200 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×200

Retail & Showroom

100×200 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×200

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×200 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×200

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×200 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×200

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×200 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×200

Self-Storage Facility

100×200 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×200 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×200 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $298,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6223/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×200 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×200 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×200 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×200 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6223/month on a 100×200 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×200 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×200 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×200 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$298,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream steel structure with lean-to canopy covering a green tractor, mower, and hay bales

100×200 Equipment & Hay Barn

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$298,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

100×200 Aircraft Hangar

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×200 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $299,900

12

100×200 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$341,900$299,900SAVE $42,000
or $6248/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×200Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×200 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$299,900$341,900Save $42,000
or as low as $6248/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×200
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×200
this size
$299,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 20,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24′ Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. 100×200 delivers 20000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 200′ · 20,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:FAA-Ready Drawings. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×200 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×200 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6248/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×200 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6248/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×200?

20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×200 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×200 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×201×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$90,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×200

Distribution Warehouse

100×200 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×200

Manufacturing Facility

100×200 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×200

Commercial Workshop

100×200 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×200

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×200 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏭 100×200

Cold Storage Facility

100×200 cold storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Facility →

🌾 100×200

Indoor Riding Arena

100×200 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×200

Retail & Showroom

100×200 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×200

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×200 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×200

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×200 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×200

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×200 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×200

Self-Storage Facility

100×200 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×200 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×200 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $299,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6248/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×200 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×200 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×200 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×200 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6248/month on a 100×200 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×200 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×200 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×200 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$299,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

100×200 Aircraft Hangar

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$299,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×200 Cold Storage Facility

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×200 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $300,300

12

100×200 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$342,350$300,300SAVE $42,050
or $6256/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×200Cold Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×200 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×200 cold storage facility packs 20000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs).

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×200·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$300,300$342,350Save $42,050
or as low as $6256/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×200
100×200
this size
$300,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 20,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X200-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 200 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×200 cold storage facility packs 20000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 200′ · 20,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~400 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage.

💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×200 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
20,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×200 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length200′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space20,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
20,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×200 Cold Storage Facility, what makes it different.

20,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$6256/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×200 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $6256/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×200?

20,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 200′ footprint with 20,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $160,000–$240,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×200 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×200 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×200 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×200 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×201×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$90,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×200

Distribution Warehouse

100×200 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 100×200

Manufacturing Facility

100×200 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×200

Commercial Workshop

100×200 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×200

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×200 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏢 100×200

Aircraft Hangar

100×200 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×200

Indoor Riding Arena

100×200 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 100×200

Retail & Showroom

100×200 retail & showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail & Showroom →

🏭 100×200

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×200 truck & fleet service center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →

🏛️ 100×200

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×200 sports & recreation facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$300,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →

🌾 100×200

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×200 livestock & dairy building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$298,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →

🏢 100×200

Self-Storage Facility

100×200 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$299,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×200 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×200 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $300,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $6256/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×200 cold storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×200 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 20,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×200 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×200 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×200 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $6256/month on a 100×200 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×200 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×200 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×200 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×200 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$300,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×200 Cold Storage Facility

20,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 200′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×200 steel building delivers 20,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$300,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Need a custom size?

Order custom metal buildings in any width and length through Steel And Stud. Request metal building pricing or start your steel building design in 3D.

Instant Estimate

Commercial Metal Buildings Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Work With Steel And Stud

Your Commercial Metal Building Dealer and Steel Building Contractor

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial building contractor and metal building dealer. From metal building pricing and steel building design to professional steel building installation, we manage your entire project. One point of contact, one fixed price.

🏭

Clear-Span Steel Structures for Commercial Use

Column-free interiors from 30 to 100+ feet wide. Steel structures for commercial properties including warehouses, retail showrooms, truck bays, racking systems and open floor plans for any business application.

📑

Permit-Ready Engineered Plans

Every commercial building order includes state-specific stamped drawings and foundation calculations engineered to your local building code. Submit directly to your permit office.

🚀

Fast Project Completion

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects go from order to operational in 4 to 12 weeks. On-site installation typically takes 1 to 5 days with our certified contractor crews.

🛡

Durable Commercial-Grade Steel

Galvanized steel framing with 20-year structural warranty on 12-gauge. Powder-coated panels in 17 colors resist rust, fire and termites. Built for decades of commercial use.

💰

Dealer-Direct Metal Building Pricing

As your dedicated Steel And Stud dealer, you get metal building pricing without middleman markups. Commercial building packages priced 30 to 50% below traditional metal building construction costs. Request pricing anytime.

🎯

Custom Steel Building Design Options

Choose any width and length to order custom metal buildings sized to your project. Add roll-up doors, walk-in entries, storefront windows, insulation, lean-tos, mezzanines and wainscot finishes. Complete steel building design flexibility from your Steel And Stud dealer.

Compare Commercial Building Packages

Standard vs Deluxe vs Custom Commercial Buildings

Steel And Stud offers three commercial building packages. Compare metal building pricing, included features and steel building design options below. Choose the right package, then request a quote from your Steel And Stud dealer.

 

Standard Commercial

Starting from $26,485 installed

Vertical roof and wall panels
14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel framing
Eave heights from 12 to 16 feet
Free delivery and professional installation included
Wainscot available as upgrade

Custom Commercial

Any size, quote-based

Any width and length based on project needs
Eave heights up to 24 feet, custom roof pitch
Red iron I-beam framing for wide clear spans
Lean-tos, mezzanines, dock access and custom layouts
Steel And Stud provides quotes within 24 hours
Customer Reviews

What Business Owners Say About Steel And Stud

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Commercial Metal Buildings.

★★★★★
4.8 / 5.0 from 2,847 verified reviews
★★★★★

"I needed a large, tall carport to protect my camping trailer in the Texas Panhandle. Bill was patient and very thorough. Three years later, after 80 mph winds collapsed it, Bill stayed in touch the whole way through the rebuild — even after warranty. No one is more customer-friendly."

RM
Ricardo M.
Phoenix, AZ
60x60x16 Commercial Building
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

DK
Diane K.
Charlotte, NC
40x100x14 Commercial Warehouse
★★★★☆

"Steel And Stud helped us plan and install a 50x50x16 Deluxe commercial building for our retail showroom. The wainscot and premium trim give it a professional look that impresses customers. Storefront windows and entry doors were pre-framed at the design stage so installation went smoothly. Looks like a project that cost twice what we paid."

TS
Trevor S.
Boise, ID
50x50x16 Deluxe Commercial Building
Frequently Asked Questions

Commercial Metal Building Buyer FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Steel And Stud commercial metal building pricing starts from $26,485 installed for a 36x40x14 Standard package. Mid-range options like the 40x100x14 warehouse start from $54,890. Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot start from $36,825. All prices shown are starting estimates and may vary based on your location, building codes, customization and project specifications. Final pricing is provided in your written quote. Custom sizes in any width and length are available.

Yes. Steel And Stud provides commercial metal buildings in any custom width and length based on your project requirements. Widths range from 20 to over 100 feet. Lengths extend up to 300 feet. Eave heights are configurable from 12 to 24 feet. Choose from the pre-configured sizes on this page or share your custom dimensions and a Steel And Stud specialist will quote it within 24 hours.

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. We partner with trusted production facilities to source pre-engineered steel buildings, then manage your entire project from planning and customization through delivery and professional steel building installation. This dealer-contractor approach gives you one point of contact from metal building pricing to completed metal building construction.

Yes. Steel And Stud is both a metal building dealer and a steel building contractor. Our certified crews handle professional steel building installation of commercial metal buildings across all 48 contiguous states. Most tubular steel buildings are installed in 1 to 5 days. Delivery and installation are included on standard orders.

Three ways to get metal building pricing and plan your project: (1) Submit a free quote request with your project details for a written commercial steel building quote within one business day. (2) Use the 3D building designer to configure steel building design options with live pricing. (3) Call 1-877-275-7048 to speak with a Steel And Stud dealer specialist.

Steel And Stud offers commercial metal buildings in any size. Pre-configured packages include 36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50 and 60x60 in both Standard and Deluxe series. Custom sizes are available in any width from 20 to 100+ feet and any length up to 300 feet, with eave heights from 12 to 24 feet. There are no fixed size limitations. Tell us your project dimensions and we will price it.

Steel And Stud provides metal buildings for business use across every industry: metal warehouse buildings, commercial storage buildings, metal shop buildings for auto and truck repair, metal retail buildings, steel office buildings, metal workshop buildings for fabrication, metal garage buildings, industrial metal buildings for manufacturing, and steel structures for commercial properties including fitness centers, churches, restaurants, aviation hangars and agricultural operations. Any business that needs a durable commercial metal structure can work with Steel And Stud as their dealer and steel building contractor.

Standard Commercial Buildings feature vertical roof and wall panels with base trim, available with eave heights from 12 to 16 feet. Best for warehouses, workshops, storage and back-of-house operations. Deluxe Commercial Buildings include two-tone wainscot, premium trim, extended eave heights and pre-framed openings for storefront windows. Best for retail, office, restaurant, fitness and customer-facing commercial spaces. Both series are available in any custom size.

Yes. Steel And Stud offers three payment options for commercial metal building projects: Standard payment with deposit at order and balance after installation, monthly financing starting from $109/mo with terms from 12 to 84 months, and rent-to-own starting from $89/mo with no credit check required.

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects are completed in 4 to 12 weeks from order to operational. On-site installation by our contractor crews typically takes 1 to 5 days for tubular steel structures. Larger red iron projects may take longer based on engineering and production requirements.

Yes. Every Steel And Stud commercial steel building is engineered to meet the specific snow, wind and seismic requirements for your installation location. Each order includes stamped engineered drawings and foundation calculations ready for permit submission. Steel And Stud handles engineering as part of our full-service metal building construction and commercial building contractor support.

Get Your Free Quote

Request Commercial Metal Building Pricing

Looking for a metal building dealer near me or a commercial building contractor near me? Steel And Stud serves all 48 states. Share your project details and our commercial building contractor team will return a written quote with metal building pricing within one business day.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor working with business owners across all 48 contiguous states. We help you scope the project, source the right pre-engineered steel building, customize the layout, manage engineering and permitting, and complete professional installation through certified contractor crews. The result is a single accountable partner from your first conversation through the final walk-through, instead of a chain of separate vendors managing different parts of the same job.

Custom Commercial Steel Buildings in Any Width and Length

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is sized to the project, not pulled from a fixed catalog. Widths run from roughly 20 feet on tubular framing to over 100 feet on red iron I-beam, with lengths reaching 300 feet and eave heights set anywhere from 12 to 24 feet. The pre-configured options on this page (36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50, 60x60 and Deluxe variants) are popular starting points, but if your operation needs a 45x80 metal warehouse building, a 38x140 distribution center, or a 55x55 steel office building with a 20-foot eave for a mezzanine, that is the size you order. Sizing decisions follow your floor plan, racking layout, vehicle clearance, equipment height and zoning requirements, not a preset list.

Commercial Applications We Build For

Steel And Stud commercial steel buildings serve a wide cross-section of business types. Warehouse operators and 3PL providers use clear-span metal warehouse buildings to maximize racking capacity and forklift movement. Auto and truck repair shops select tall-eave steel shop buildings with multi-bay roll-up doors that clear two-post lifts and service trucks. Retailers, dealerships and showroom operators choose Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot and storefront window openings to project a polished, customer-facing exterior. Light manufacturers, fabrication shops and contractor yards run their operations out of metal workshop buildings sized for welding tables, machine tools and equipment staging.

Beyond those core uses, churches and event venues install wide clear-span steel structures for sanctuaries and fellowship halls; fitness operators and indoor sports facilities use tall-eave commercial buildings for courts, CrossFit boxes and batting cages; agricultural businesses build packing sheds and farm-retail commercial space; aviation operators install steel hangars for general aviation aircraft and helicopters; and self-storage developers partition long commercial buildings into rentable units. Whatever your business does inside the building, the building is engineered around it.

How to Get Pricing and Start Your Project

The fastest path to accurate metal building pricing is a written quote. Submit your approximate dimensions, intended use and installation address through the free quote form and a Steel And Stud commercial building specialist returns a detailed written quote within one business day. The quote reflects your specific width and length, eave height, framing gauge, door and window selections, insulation package, finish choices and the snow, wind and seismic requirements at your installation location. There is no obligation, no pressure, and you are free to compare and adjust before placing the order.

If you prefer to explore configurations visually first, the 3D building designer lets you set dimensions, add doors and windows, change finishes and see live pricing as you adjust. Or call 1-877-275-7048 to reach a specialist directly. However you start, the goal is project-level numbers fast enough to move on real timelines.

Standard, Deluxe and Custom Building Packages

Steel And Stud delivers three commercial building package tiers. Standard Commercial Buildings are the workhorse choice for warehouses, workshops, contractor yards, mini-storage and back-of-house operations where function takes priority over facade. They include vertical roof and wall panels, galvanized steel framing in 14-gauge or 12-gauge, eave heights from 12 to 16 feet, free delivery and professional installation, with starting prices from $26,485 installed.

Deluxe Commercial Buildings are designed for customer-facing applications where exterior appearance matters: retail stores, restaurants, professional offices, fitness centers, auto dealerships and worship halls. The Deluxe package adds a two-tone wainscot exterior, premium gable and corner trim, extended eave heights up to 18 feet and pre-framed openings ready for storefront windows, additional doors and ADA-compliant entries. Starting prices begin at $36,825 installed.

Custom Commercial Buildings cover everything the Standard and Deluxe packages do not. Red iron I-beam clear spans up to 100 feet, eave heights above 18 feet, mezzanine levels, lean-tos on multiple sides, dock-leveler-ready loading bays, custom roof pitches and specialized door layouts are quoted individually based on your engineering and site requirements. There is no dimension or feature Steel And Stud cannot accommodate as a custom project.

Steel Building Design and Configuration Options

Customization happens at the design stage, before your building enters production, so installation runs without surprises. Door options span sectional roll-up garage doors from 8x8 up to 16x16 for vehicle bays and equipment access, commercial walk-in doors for daily foot traffic, and storefront entry systems with pre-framed openings for customer-facing builds. Window openings can be placed on any wall and sized to match retail visibility, office natural light or warehouse ventilation needs. Insulation runs from R-13 for moderate climate buffering up to R-30 for fully conditioned commercial interiors with HVAC.

Beyond doors, windows and insulation, you can add lean-to canopies on any side for covered loading or outdoor work, mezzanine levels to add usable square footage without expanding the footprint, interior partition walls for offices or partitioned storage, dock-height openings for trailer loading, and pre-engineered HVAC penetrations. Exterior color is selected from 17 panel options, applied independently across roof, walls, trim and (on Deluxe builds) wainscot, so the finished commercial steel building reflects your brand or fits the surrounding architecture.

Engineering, Permitting and Code Compliance

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is engineered for the specific snow, wind and seismic loads at your installation address, with stamped drawings and foundation calculations included in every order ready for permit submission. Engineering is handled in-house as part of standard service, so there is no need to hire a separate structural engineer or coordinate stamps from multiple parties. The package covers what your local building department requires for commercial permits, including ground snow load, basic wind speed, exposure category and seismic risk category specific to your zip code.

Professional Installation by Certified Steel And Stud Contractor Crews

Once the permit is approved and your site is prepared, Steel And Stud contractor crews arrive to complete the steel building installation on your schedule. Most tubular steel commercial buildings reach a weather-tight, fully erected state in one to five days on site, depending on dimensions and configuration. Larger red iron I-beam projects with custom features run longer based on span width, mezzanine work and specialized openings. The typical timeline from order placement to a fully operational commercial metal building is four to twelve weeks, against four to nine months for stick-built or block construction of equivalent square footage. You pay your deposit at order and the balance after the completed walk-through.

Commercial Metal Building Pricing and What Drives Cost

Pricing on a commercial metal building moves with the build. Two structures with the same dimensions can quote very differently once you factor in framing gauge, eave height, the snow and wind loads at the site, door and window count, insulation depth, finish package, lean-to additions, mezzanine work and any custom engineering. A 36x40x14 with three roll-up doors, a walk-in entry, R-19 insulation and a 14-foot lean-to is a different building from a 36x40x14 in base configuration, even though the dimensions match. Your written quote from Steel And Stud reflects the building you are actually ordering, with starting prices serving as a baseline rather than a final number.

Financing, Rent-to-Own and Section 179

Three payment paths are available for every commercial metal building project. Standard payment splits the total into a deposit at order and the balance after installation, which delivers the lowest total cost. Monthly financing starts from $109 per month with terms from 12 to 84 months and a soft credit pull. Rent-to-own starts from $89 per month, requires no credit check, and transfers ownership at the end of a 24 to 60 month term. Business buyers may also qualify for Section 179 deductions, which can allow a full first-year deduction on qualifying commercial metal building purchases.

Service Coverage Across All 48 States

Steel And Stud delivers and installs commercial metal buildings throughout the lower 48. Coverage extends to every state, but each project is engineered and permitted around the codes, snow and wind loads, and inspection processes of your specific installation address. Business owners working with a metal building dealer near them or hiring a commercial building contractor in their state get the same Steel And Stud team and the same dealer-direct pricing, with a project specialist who knows the local permit office and matches the build to your jurisdiction.

Why Buyers Choose Steel And Stud

The dealer-contractor model condenses what would normally be three or four separate vendor relationships into one. Instead of negotiating with a manufacturer, contracting an erector, hiring a structural engineer and managing freight separately, you place a single order with Steel And Stud and receive an engineered, delivered, installed commercial steel building under one fixed quote. There is no general contractor markup added to the chain, no broker margin built into freight, and no finger-pointing between vendors when something needs adjusting. Steel And Stud has served commercial customers since 2004, holds an A+ BBB rating, and carries over 2,800 verified buyer reviews averaging 4.8 stars across project sizes from small workshops to multi-acre distribution facilities.

Start Your Commercial Steel Building Project Today

Ready to plan your project? Submit a free quote request, configure your build in the 3D designer, or call 1-877-275-7048. A Steel And Stud specialist will return your written commercial steel building quote within one business day, walk you through customization options, line up financing if needed, and schedule professional installation once the project is locked in.

Related Steel And Stud Building Categories

Outside of commercial metal buildings, Steel And Stud also operates as a dealer and contractor for residential and agricultural structures including steel garages, metal barns, metal carports, RV covers and barndominiums. Steel building materials such as purlins, girts, standing seam roofing and insulated metal panels are also available for self-build and material-only projects.

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Dealer-direct metal building pricing starting from $26,485 installed. All prices are starting estimates. Custom sizes in any width and length. Professional steel building installation by our commercial building contractor team across 48 states. Get a free quote or call your nearest Steel And Stud commercial building contractor to plan your project today.

View Cart